PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

98
Hardware Service Manual 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drives Frame 9 (132 -160 KW / 200-250 HP)

Transcript of PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Page 1: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Hardware Service Manual

700S High Performance AC Drives and700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drives

Frame 9 (132 -160 KW 200-250 HP)

Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc

DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you

bull identify a hazardbull avoid the hazardbull recognize the consequences

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures

Table of Contents

Important User Information 1-2

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4

Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5

Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10

Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40

Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6

2

Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1

Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8

Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11

Preface

Overview

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions

What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTED

IND CONT EQ

9D42

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTEDIND CONT EQ

9D42

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 2: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc

DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc

WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you

bull identify a hazardbull avoid the hazardbull recognize the consequences

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures

Table of Contents

Important User Information 1-2

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4

Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5

Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10

Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40

Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6

2

Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1

Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8

Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11

Preface

Overview

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions

What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTED

IND CONT EQ

9D42

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTEDIND CONT EQ

9D42

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 3: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Table of Contents

Important User Information 1-2

Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4

Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5

Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10

Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40

Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6

2

Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1

Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8

Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11

Preface

Overview

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions

What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTED

IND CONT EQ

9D42

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTEDIND CONT EQ

9D42

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 4: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

2

Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1

Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8

Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11

Preface

Overview

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions

What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTED

IND CONT EQ

9D42

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTEDIND CONT EQ

9D42

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 5: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Preface

Overview

Who Should Use this Manual

This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions

What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTED

IND CONT EQ

9D42

Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V

Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW

250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power

DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350

583 - 713350Amps

Input DC

AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz

0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)

Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz

Continuous Amps 300245330368

3002453303681 Min Overload Amps

2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9

Serial Number 2622381652

2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)

Series AStandard IO NONE

Original Firmware No 204

UL USC AElig

LISTEDIND CONT EQ

9D42

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 6: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

p-2 Overview

What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature

The following publications provide general drive information

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information

The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller

Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control

SGI-11

A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452

Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN001

Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN004

Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives

20D-IN006

Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)

PFLEX-RM001

Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)

PFLEX-RM002

Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 7: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Overview p-3

Understanding Manual Conventions

Terms

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action

Cross References

ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2

ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C

Additional Support Available on Internet

Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)

Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 8: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

p-4 Overview

General Precautions Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system

ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 9: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting and Error Codes

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 10: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory

At a minimum perform and record the following

bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors

inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling

bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts

bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components

bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components

bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage

Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases

1 Check for voltage on each input phase

2 Check the status of each external input fuses

HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus

Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost

1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control

Board cooling fan

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 11: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3

Addressing 700H Hardware Faults

HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload

Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module

HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error

1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board

3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board

5 Replace the Main Control Board

HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives

bull Check precharge circuit wiring

bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block

HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match

Replace output power module or program a new power board

HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C

Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary

Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below

[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption

UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H

Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption

1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value

Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option

Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage

OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase

Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase

Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault

Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition

InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure

Cycle powerReplace drive

Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors

were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage

Clear fault

Name No Description Action (if appropriate)

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5

Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom

The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions

Blown Input Fuses

Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses

RectifyingModule

OK

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Disconnect MotorLeads

Perform ForwardDiode Tests on

Rectifying Module

Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

Check Motor andLead Resistances

at 1000V

Disconnect ACChoke from

Rectifying Module

ReplaceRectifyingModule

ReplacePowerModule

ReplaceCapacitors

Remedy Motorand LeadProblems

ReplaceAC

Choke

ReconnectAC

Choke

ReconnectMotorLeads

PowerModule

OK

CapacitorsOK

Motor andLead Resistances

gt 1 Mohm

Are ThereAny Line to

Load Shorts

Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts

1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

No Output Voltage

Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running

Measure DC BusVoltage

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

Measure PowerSupply Voltages

Replace PowerSupply

Check BoardConnections

Does DriveRun

Does DriveRun

Replace PowerInterface Board

(on 700S)

Does DriveRun

Replace VoltageFeedback Board

(on 700S)

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

Voltages withinSpecification

Replace MainControl Board

Yes

No

Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7

No HIM Display

Use this procedure when the HIM does not function

Perform forwarddiode tests on

Rectifying Module

RectifyingModule OK

Replace RectifyingModule

No

Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and

Damaged Reliefs

CapacitorsOK

ReplaceCapacitors

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Measure DC BusVoltage

Measure PowerSupply on X4 of

DPI Circuit Board

Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections

Replace HIM

Does HIMFunction

DC BusVoltage withinSpecification

VoltageEqual 12V dc

Replace Voltage Feedback Board

(on 700S)

Replace OutputPower Module

(on 700H)

Yes

Yes

No

1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes

Over-Temperature Faults

Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)

Check SurroundingAir Temperature

TemperatureExceeds

Specification

Provide Additional Airflow

or Air Conditioning

ContactAllen-Bradley

DrivesTechnicalSupport

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

CurrentExceeds

Specification

Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length

and Surrounding Temp

Proper SpaceAt Inlet

Power VoltageEquals Bus

Voltage

ConnectionGood

Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms

Fan Motor hasOpen or Short

Circuits

Check Motor Current and Load

Levels

Check PWM Frequency

Check Fan andAir Flow

Through the Drive

Check Power Voltage on Fan

Inverter

Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan

Inverter

Check FanInverter Output on

X1 X4 and X5

Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits

Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher

Rating

Lower PWMFrequency

RemedySpacing at

Inlet

Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)

RepairConnection

ReplaceFan Inverter

ReplaceFan Motor

AirlflowBlockages Yes

Remove Air Flow

Blockages

Yes

No

No

Fan Running

Properly

No

Yes

Chapter 2

Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components

A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

2-2 Component Test Procedures

1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

Component Test Procedures 2-3

5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)

Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

2-4 Component Test Procedures

Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper

7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8

6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10

7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12

8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15

9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged

A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V

Component Test Procedures 2-5

Measurement of Rectifying Module

12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10

13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements

Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board

14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1

15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6

17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black

18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black

2-6 Component Test Procedures

Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points

Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results

Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)

X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)

X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1

Precharging Resistors

Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON

DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -

J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL

Component Test Procedures 2-7

Checking the Brake Chopper

These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance

18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11

19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug

20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug

Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance

21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)

Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements

Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-

3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4

4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34

5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)

6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)

Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -

X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF

2-8 Component Test Procedures

Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements

7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply

8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)

Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures

These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Monitor the current while testing

7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized

8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized

9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current

11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)

Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

135 x 480v = 648v

Component Test Procedures 2-9

Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks

2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground

3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)

2-10 Component Test Procedures

Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring

If cables are touching the ferrite ring

1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3

2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2

3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Chapter 3

Access Procedures

Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following

ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero

ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook

Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m

(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m

(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff

09 N-m (8 lb-in)

3-2 Access Procedures

700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)

M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)

Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)

AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C

M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)

IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals

M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars

M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)

M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)

M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)

Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

Access Procedures 3-3

Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company

Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams

Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware

Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)

Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)

Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)

Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)

AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)

AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)

Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)

Item Screw Torque Final

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit

Tightening Torque

Fastener Type

Pozidrive Screw

Phillips Screw

Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut

3-4 Access Procedures

Opening Drive Opening

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Remove Connection cover

4 Remove Power cover

(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2

3 N-m (27 lb-in)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(8 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-5

5 Remove Conduit Cover

Closing

The covers may be replaced and removed in any order

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

(3 Screws)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-6 Access Procedures

Removing the DPI HIM Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly

5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM

6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board

7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)

Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Back View of DPI

X4X2

Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly

Access Procedures 3-7

8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Mounting Screws

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3-8 Access Procedures

Removing 700S Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller

Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors

J7

J2

Captive Screw

Access Procedures 3-9

permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board

6 Loosen captive screw

7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive

8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge

Installation

Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-10 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

ScrewsStandoffs

Shield

J2

J1

J4

J5

(5) (4)

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-11

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board

6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield

7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate

8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate

Installation

Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-12 Access Procedures

Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive

4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside

5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

Screws(5)

Fiber-OpticSockets

P109 N-m(8 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-13

damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside

7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame

8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame

Installation

Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

3-14 Access Procedures

Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables

5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots

6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

Keys

X7

X2(Slot A)

Serial Port

X3(Slot B)

X4(Slot C)

X5(Slot D)

X6(Slot E)

Access Procedures 3-15

7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive

8 Remove the Control Assembly

Installation

Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly

5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17

Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-16 Access Procedures

6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive

7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket

8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board

PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

X7Connects to

Main ControlBoard

X2Connects to

24V dc Power

-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables

Access Procedures 3-17

9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside

Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii

10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket

11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket

Installation

Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50

Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly

ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors

3-18 Access Procedures

6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)

7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside

8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6

9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive

10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive

11Remove the Conduit from the drive

12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-19

13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires

14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive

15Remove the Cross Plate

6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)

P23 N-m(27 lb-in)

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-20 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the EMC-Protection Plate

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-21

7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)

8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases

Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

3-22 Access Procedures

9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors

10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate

11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-23

Installation

Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Power Module Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

3-24 Access Procedures

7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board

X6

X9

X7X1X15X8X5

X11

X10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Access Procedures 3-25

8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars

9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module

10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

3-26 Access Procedures

11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive

Access Procedures 3-27

Installation

Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Removing the Rectifying Module

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly

5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate

7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present

J9

J1

J5

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)

AC Wiring

Brake Chopper Cable

3-28 Access Procedures

8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board

J5

J9

J1

X13 X6 X10 X11

X12

Access Procedures 3-29

9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)

10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board

J9

J1

J5

PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)

3-30 Access Procedures

11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars

12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module

13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module

Remove

Remove

Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-31

14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive

Installation

Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board

3-32 Access Procedures

Removing the Main Fan Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly

Remove

Access Procedures 3-33

5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame

8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times

9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive

Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan

10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

3-34 Access Procedures

Installation

Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply

Removing the Fan Power Supply

Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-35

5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires

6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses

3-36 Access Procedures

7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket

8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)

9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply

12

34 ON

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-37

Installation

1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured

3 Install fan power supply plate

X6

X1X4

X5

X7

S1

X2

X8

1

ON

23

4

S11

ON

23

4

S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off

3-38 Access Procedures

Removing Capacitors Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board

7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)

8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars

9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals

45 45 45 45

44 44 44 44

114 112

42 4254 545352

5352

Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware

Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-39

10Remove busbars and insulators

11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive

12Remove capacitors from drive

Installation

Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38

3-40 Access Procedures

Removing the AC-Choke Removal

1 Remove power from drive

2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive

4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate

5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive

Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation

of the Belleville (cupped)washer

13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)

Access Procedures 3-41

6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate

7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)

8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals

PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)

6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)

3-42 Access Procedures

9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke

10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs

Installation

Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1

PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)

Lifting Lug

Lifting Lug

Chapter 4

Start-Up After Repair

Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation

Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support

bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level

ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing

Phone United StatesCanada

12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)

Outside United StatesCanada

You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support

Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives

E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom

4-2 Start-Up After Repair

Before Applying Power to the Drive

1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-

2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the

points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3

DC- DC+R+ R-

(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit

Start-Up After Repair 4-3

Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module

3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module

4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it

Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-

L3 DC-L1 DC+R+

0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1

0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)

(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+

L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2

DC+R+ L3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-

T3 DC-T1 DC+R+

0290V plusmn 0075V

T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1

Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3

Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -

R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V

4-4 Start-Up After Repair

Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)

This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply

1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized

2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal

3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero

4 Switch on the external DC power supply

5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)

6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)

ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)

7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

9 Start the drive by pressing

10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

12Return the configurations to suit the application

13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply

Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage

3 2bullΠ

---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =

Start-Up After Repair 4-5

Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected

2 Energize the drive

3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands

4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor

5 Start the drive by pressing

6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)

7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive

8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)

9 Return the configurations to suit the application

Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S

The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Energize the drive

4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu

5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu

6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics

7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM

Esc

4-6 Start-Up After Repair

Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load

1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected

2 Verify that the motor cables are connected

3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected

4 Energize the drive

5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed

6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in

ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)

ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)

7 Stop the drive

Appendix A

Service Tools and Equipment

Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters

Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used

This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements

Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS

750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic

isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage

continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent

7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac

250A

A-2 Service Tools and Equipment

26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units

27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit

Item Description Details

Appendix B

Schematics

put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input

PEPE

L3T

MOV

asse

mbly

L2S

LIR

L3T

L2S

LIR

PCB

REAC

TOR

LINE

CMRE

ACTO

R

REAC

TOR

CM

L3T

L2S

LIR

To Pow

erC

ircui

try

Figu

re B

1

Inpu

t Con

ditio

ning

Circ

uitr

y fo

r Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

B-2 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ningDC

-DC

+R+

K3

K2

K1

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

2

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-3

Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J1

To V

olta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d J2

WT

3 V

T2

UT

1

DC+

DC-

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

UT1

WT3

VT2

67

Fibe

r

To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)

To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)

To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)

To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)

To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)

To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

3

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00S

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-4 Schematics

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n

2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

X8

X3X2X1

X9

X41

X4

Main

s Volt

age

Supp

ress

ion

Recti

fier B

oard

X13

X5X6

X10

X11

X12

L3T

L2S

LIR

Fr

om A

CIn

put

Con

ditio

ning

K1

To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

4

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith A

C In

put

Schematics B-5

Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input

4

2

W_LO

W_HI

TERM W

TERM V

V_HI

V_LO

TERM U

U_LO

U_HI

I_V

I_W

I_U

UT1

VT2

WT

3

R-

Mea

sure

men

ts

DC-

DC+

Powe

r Boa

rd

X10

X7X5

X8

X9

M4

Cros

s Plat

eFa

n2

24 V

DC

I_U I_V

I_W

4

44

X10

TERM A

BRK

X11

BRK

WT

3

VT2

UT1

4

X6X1

X4

DC+ 1

IFS 2X1

5

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

M M3

EMC

Prot

ectio

nPl

ate

Fan

M M2

Fan

Inve

rter

Cooli

ng F

anM

224

VDC

224

VDC

DC+

R+

DC-

PE PE

F1R1

CR2

M

F1R1

CR2

M

X50

CR1

Pilot

Rela

y

CR1

MM

ain D

C Co

ntac

tor

MCR

2Pr

echa

rge

1 2 5 6

Exte

rnal

Circ

uitry

DCSo

urce

M

DC B

usPr

echa

rge

Cont

rol

2 To Opto Adapter Board

24 V

DC

To O

pto

Adap

ter B

oard

To F

an P

ower

Sup

ply

Figu

re B

5

Pow

er C

ircui

try

for 7

00H

Driv

es w

ith D

C In

put

B-6 Schematics

Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives

HIM

J10

J34

J2 J7 J1

TB2

P5 P4 P680

P1Co

mm

Inpu

t

P1Fe

edba

ckIn

puts

P2 P3

J11

72

J1

2 9

20

10

50 34

RS23

2

FLEX

IO

50

J35

P2 P3

RX

34

J2 -U -V -WDC-

DC+

J8 +24V

J5 T

x

J4 R

x

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X42

Cont

rol

Chas

sis F

anM5

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

2

From

Po

wer

Mod

ule

From

Pow

erM

odul

e

Main

Cont

rol

Boar

d

Sync

hLink

Feed

back

Optio

nBo

ard

Drive

Logix

Cont

rolle

r

NetL

inxDa

ught

erca

rd

M6

J3 J17

J18

J15

Exte

rnal

24V

DC

1 =

24V

3 =

Com

mon

(75W

min)

J5

J6 T

x

J7 R

x

J4

22

+24

V Iso

+12

V

-12

V

+5V

Pan

Fan

Cont

rol

J16

TB1

J9

TXJ8

Powe

r Int

erfa

ce B

oard

80W

Powe

rSu

pply

Volta

ge

Feed

back

Boar

d

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

67

Fibe

r

From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)

From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)

From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)

From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)

From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)

From Power Board J12 (ADconv)

45

23

1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)

J8J9

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

M

M

Fibe

r

8 9

9 8

Figu

re B

6 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0S D

rives

Schematics B-7

Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives

HIM

20

X3J3

J2J1

X2

X1

HIM

DOOR

EXTE

RNAL

DPI

X4

PWR

STS

PORT

MOD

NET

ANE

T B

9

9

DPI A

ssem

bly

EXAM

PLE

20-H

IM-A

3

20-V

B006

01

DPI

Inte

rface

Boar

d

DPI

Com

mOp

tion

DPI

Beze

l

X8

67

Fibe

r4

52

31

24 V

DC

From

Pow

er B

oard

From

Pow

er B

oard

Opto

Ada

pter

Boar

dJ1

Exte

rnal

24V

dc

J1

2

X1

37

Cont

rol B

oard

X2(S

lot A

)

20C-

DA1-

A(2

4V d

c Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

or

20

C-DA

1-B

(115

V ac

Digi

tal In

put

w A

nalog

IO)

10

Analo

gIO

8 1

0

Digit

alIn

puts

X3(S

lot B

)

20C-

DO1

(Digi

tal O

utpu

tOp

tion)

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

3

Digit

alOu

tput

s

X4

(Slot

C)

Optio

nBo

ard

X5

(Slot

D)

Optio

nBo

ard

X6(S

lot E

)

20C-

DPI1

(DPI

Com

mun

icatio

nsOp

tion)

X1

X3X2

X7(R

S-23

2Pr

ogra

mm

ingPo

rt)

Figu

re B

7 C

ircui

t Boa

rd C

onne

ctio

ns fo

r 70

0H D

rives

B-8 Schematics

Fan Power Supply Connections

X8

F2 6

A

X2

4

Fan

Freq

uenc

yC

onve

rter

+-

Off

S1-

1

Off

S1-

2

On

S1-

3

Off

S1-

4

S1

- Set

up S

witc

h

F1 6

A

From

Pow

erB

oard

X10

From

Pow

erB

oard

X7

M1

Bla

ck

Yello

wG

reen

Blu

e

Mai

n Fa

nM

Bla

ck 6

Bla

ck 5

Bla

ck 4

Bla

ck 3

Bla

ck 2

Bla

ck 1

X4

X5

22

mf

10 M

W

22

mf

10 M

WB

row

n

7 m

f

Fan

Are

a

Are

a U

nder

Mai

n P

ower

Ter

min

al S

trip

Are

a U

nder

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y P

late

Figu

re B

8

Fan

Pow

er S

uppl

y Co

nnec

tions

Appendix C

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems

C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

1

700S

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3

700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction

S

Figu

re C

2

700H

261

A 3

00A

Mec

hani

cal C

onst

ruct

ion

C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan

Figu

re C

3

Cros

s Pl

ate

(term

inal

s) a

nd In

tern

al F

an

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5

EMC-Protection Plate

Figu

re C

4

EMC-

Prot

ectio

n Pl

ate

C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Capacitor Sub-Assembly

DC

+

DC

-

Figu

re C

5

Capa

cito

r Sub

-Ass

embl

y

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7

Fan Sub-Assembly

Figu

re C

6

Fan

Sub-

Asse

mbl

y

C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Control Bracket

Figu

re C

7

Cont

rol B

rack

et

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9

Rectifying Module

Figu

re C

8

Rec

tifyi

ng M

odul

e

C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Power Module

Figu

re C

9

Pow

er M

odul

e

Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11

Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings

Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1

Figure C26 Frame Figure C1

Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1

Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1

Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1

Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1

Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1

Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1

Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1

Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1

Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1

Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5

Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5

Figure C8Figure C9

53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9

55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1

Figure C2

Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C7

64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4

66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2

68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3

Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C3

75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2

81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1

Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1

Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1

Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1

Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1

Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1

Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1

Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1

Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1

Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C4

104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5

C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams

Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1

Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1

Figure C2Figure C9

117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9

118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2

200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1

Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1

Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2

Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA

  • Front Cover
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Overview
      • Who Should Use this Manual
      • What is in this Manual
      • What is Not in this Manual
      • Reference Materials
      • Understanding Manual Conventions
      • Additional Support Available on Internet
      • General Precautions
          • Chapter 1
            • Troubleshooting and Error Codes
              • Creating Fault Reports
              • Addressing 700S Hardware Faults
              • Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
              • Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
                  • Chapter 2
                    • Component Test Procedures
                      • Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
                      • Checking Rectifying Module
                      • Checking the Main Fan
                      • Checking Capacitors
                      • Checking AC-Choke
                      • Checking Terminals
                          • Chapter 3
                            • Access Procedures
                              • Torque Specifications
                              • Opening Drive
                              • Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
                              • Removing 700S Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
                              • Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
                              • Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
                              • Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
                              • Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
                              • Removing the Power Module
                              • Removing the Rectifying Module
                              • Removing the Main Fan
                              • Removing the Fan Power Supply
                              • Removing Capacitors
                              • Removing the AC-Choke
                                  • Chapter 4
                                    • Start-Up After Repair
                                      • Loading the 700H EEPROM
                                      • Before Applying Power to the Drive
                                      • Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
                                      • Testing Without a Motor
                                      • Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
                                      • Testing With the Motor
                                          • Appendix A
                                            • Service Tools and Equipment
                                              • Software Tools
                                              • Service tools
                                                  • Appendix B
                                                    • Schematics
                                                      • put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
                                                      • Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
                                                      • Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
                                                      • Fan Power Supply Connections
                                                          • Appendix C
                                                            • Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
                                                              • 700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • 700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
                                                              • Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
                                                              • EMC-Protection Plate
                                                              • Capacitor Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Fan Sub-Assembly
                                                              • Control Bracket
                                                              • Rectifying Module
                                                              • Power Module
                                                              • Key to ID Numbers
                                                                  • Pub No - Date
                                                                    • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                                                                      Intro

                                                                      Generic pub print specs

                                                                      ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                                                                      ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                                                                      IN RN pub type specs

                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs

                                                                      AP PP pub type specs

                                                                      BR pub type specs

                                                                      Field definitions

                                                                      ampL04032006ampRampP
                                                                      PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                                                                      EA = Each
                                                                      PK = Pack
                                                                      PD = Pad
                                                                      RL = Roll
                                                                      BK = Book
                                                                      CT = Carton
                                                                      BX = Box
                                                                      ST = Set
                                                                      Multiple Order Qty
                                                                      Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                                                                      Business Group
                                                                      The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                                                                      CorporateBusiness Development
                                                                      Finance
                                                                      Human Resources
                                                                      IT
                                                                      Logistics
                                                                      Manufacturing
                                                                      Marketing Commercial
                                                                      Marketing Europe
                                                                      Marketing Other
                                                                      Operations
                                                                      Order Services
                                                                      Other
                                                                      Process Improvement
                                                                      Procurement
                                                                      Quality
                                                                      Sales
                                                                      Max Order Quantity
                                                                      Presale items = 100
                                                                      Postsale items = 5
                                                                      NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                                                                      Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                                                                      Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                                                                      Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                                                                      BindingStitching
                                                                      For a Form (F) use
                                                                      CARBONLESS
                                                                      CUTSHEET
                                                                      ENVELOPE
                                                                      For a Book (B) use
                                                                      LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                                                                      PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                                                                      PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                                                                      SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                                                                      STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                                                                      STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                                                                      STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                                                                      THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                                                                      THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                                                                      Sides Printed
                                                                      Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                                                                      Simplex = Single-sided printing
                                                                      Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                                                                      Number of Forms to a Sheet
                                                                      Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
                                                                      Number of Sheets Required to Print
                                                                      Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                                                                      Paper Stock Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      PLAIN Bond
                                                                      ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                                                                      BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                                                                      BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                                                                      C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                                                                      C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                                                                      C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                                                                      CARD Card Stock
                                                                      CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                                                                      CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                                                                      COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                                                                      CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                                                                      CUSTOM Custom
                                                                      CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                                                                      ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                                                                      ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                                                                      ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                                                                      GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                                                                      GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                                                                      HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                                                                      INDEX Index
                                                                      LABEL80 80 Up Label
                                                                      MICROPRT Micro Print
                                                                      OFFSET Offset
                                                                      PART2 2 Part
                                                                      PART3 3 Part
                                                                      PART4 4 Part
                                                                      PART5 5 Part
                                                                      PART6 6 Part
                                                                      PERF 12 inch Perfed
                                                                      PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                                                                      PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                                                                      PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                                                                      RECYL Recycled
                                                                      SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                                                                      SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                                                                      SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                                                                      TAG Tag
                                                                      TEXT Text
                                                                      TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                                                                      TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                                                                      TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                                                                      TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                                                                      VELLUM Vellum
                                                                      VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                                                                      WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                                                                      WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                                                                      WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                                                                      Paper Stock Color
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Blue
                                                                      Buff
                                                                      Canary
                                                                      Cherry
                                                                      Clear
                                                                      Cream
                                                                      Custom
                                                                      Goldrenrod
                                                                      Gray
                                                                      Green
                                                                      Ivory
                                                                      Lavender
                                                                      Manilla
                                                                      NCRPinkCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlue
                                                                      NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanary
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                                                                      NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                                                                      NCRWhiteGreen
                                                                      NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                                                                      NCRWhitePink
                                                                      NCRWhiteWhite
                                                                      Opaque
                                                                      Orange
                                                                      Orchid
                                                                      Peach
                                                                      Pink
                                                                      Purple
                                                                      Salmon
                                                                      Tan
                                                                      Violet
                                                                      White
                                                                      Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                                                                      11 x 17
                                                                      18 x 24 Poster
                                                                      24 x 36 Poster
                                                                      3 x 5
                                                                      36 x 24 Poster
                                                                      4 x 6
                                                                      475 x 7
                                                                      475 x 775
                                                                      55 x 85
                                                                      6 x 4
                                                                      7 x 9
                                                                      7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                                                                      85 x 11
                                                                      825 x 10875
                                                                      825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                                                                      8375 x 10875
                                                                      9 x 12
                                                                      A4
                                                                      A5
                                                                      Other - Custom size listed below
                                                                      Drilling Locations
                                                                      1CENTER
                                                                      1LEFTTOP
                                                                      1TOPCENTER
                                                                      2LEFT
                                                                      2LEFT2TOP
                                                                      2TOP
                                                                      2TOP2LEFT
                                                                      2TOP3LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5LEFT
                                                                      2TOP5RIGHT
                                                                      3BOTTOM
                                                                      3LEFT
                                                                      3LEFT2TOP
                                                                      3LEFT3TOP
                                                                      3RIGHT
                                                                      3TOP
                                                                      3TOP5LEFT
                                                                      5BOTTOOM
                                                                      5CENTER
                                                                      5LEFT
                                                                      5RIGHT
                                                                      5RIGHT2TOP
                                                                      5TOP
                                                                      Fold Type
                                                                      Description
                                                                      HALF Half
                                                                      C C Fold
                                                                      DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                                                                      OFFSETZ Offset Z
                                                                      SAMPLE See Sample
                                                                      SHORT Short Fold
                                                                      V V Fold
                                                                      Z Z Fold
                                                                      Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                                                                      Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                                                                      77 or more pages NA
                                                                      33 to 76 pages 25
                                                                      3 to 32 pages 50
                                                                      1 or 2 pages 100
                                                                      Comments
                                                                      CoverText Stock
                                                                      100 Gloss Cover
                                                                      100 Gloss Text
                                                                      100 Text
                                                                      10pt C1S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Cover
                                                                      10pt C2S Text
                                                                      10pt Text Stock
                                                                      110 White Index
                                                                      12pt C1S Cover
                                                                      20 White Opaque Bond
                                                                      50 Colored Offset
                                                                      50 White Offset
                                                                      50 White Opaque
                                                                      60 Cover Stock
                                                                      60 White Offset
                                                                      80 Gloss Cover
                                                                      80 Gloss Text
                                                                      8pt C1S White
                                                                      90 White Index
                                                                      CoverText Ink
                                                                      Black
                                                                      Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color
                                                                      4 color over black
                                                                      4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                                                                      4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                                                                      4 color + aqueous
                                                                      4 color + varnish
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 100 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA 50 RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information NA NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 EA 1 NA Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 07212004 5 B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 98 49 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 14 3LEFT LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black NA
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      EA 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group 5 B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                                                                      Corp 17501
                                                                      Bill To 69
                                                                      dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                                                                      Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                                                                      Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                                                                      See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                                                                      Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                                                                      This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                                                                      Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                                                                      Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                                                                      IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
                                                                      UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
                                                                      AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
                                                                      BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
                                                                      Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                                                                      Attach Print Specs to PDF
                                                                      For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Page 12: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 13: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 14: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 15: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 16: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 17: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 18: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 19: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 20: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 21: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 22: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 23: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 24: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 25: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 26: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 27: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 28: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 29: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 30: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 31: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 32: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 33: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 34: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 35: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 36: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 37: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 38: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 39: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 40: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 41: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 42: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 43: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 44: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 45: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 46: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 47: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 48: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 49: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 50: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 51: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 52: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 53: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 54: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 55: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 56: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 57: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 58: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 59: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 60: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 61: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 62: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 63: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 64: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 65: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 66: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 67: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 68: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 69: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 70: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 71: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 72: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 73: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 74: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 75: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 76: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 77: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 78: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 79: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 80: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 81: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 82: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 83: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 84: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 85: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 86: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 87: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 88: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 89: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 90: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 91: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 92: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 93: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 94: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 95: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 96: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 97: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 98: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 99: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 100: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 101: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 102: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 103: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...
Page 104: PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drives and 700H ...